Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for
the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under
which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or
transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens
Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly
trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens
Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and
improvement of the documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS
DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL,
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS
OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR
THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective
owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2011. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This document consists of a total of 838 pages. All pages are issue 1.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 i
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8 Timing 77
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration.................................. 77
8.2 T0 Configuration ............................................................................... 80
8.3 T1 Configuration ............................................................................... 81
8.4 T3 Configuration ............................................................................... 83
8.5 T4 Configuration ............................................................................... 85
9 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows 87
9.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 87
9.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................... 88
9.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 89
9.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 90
9.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 91
9.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 92
9.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 93
9.8 ETH Traffic Flow ............................................................................... 94
9.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ...................................................................... 95
9.10 VC4 Configuration ............................................................................ 96
9.11 VC4 Selection ................................................................................... 99
9.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow.................................................... 100
10 Alarms 101
10.1 Alarm List........................................................................................ 101
10.2 NEAP Configuration ....................................................................... 104
10.3 Equipment Alarms .......................................................................... 105
10.4 Communication Alarms .................................................................. 107
10.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table............................................. 109
10.6 E3/VC3 Alarms ............................................................................... 114
10.7 1:N MSP Alarms ............................................................................. 116
10.8 TIF Configuration ............................................................................ 118
10.9 TCA List .......................................................................................... 119
11 Protection Traffic Flow 121
11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow ..................................................... 121
11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow ................................................. 122
11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow................................................. 123
11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow................................................. 124
11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 125
11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 126
11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 127
11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 128
11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .......................................................... 129
11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ...................................................... 130
11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 131
11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 132
11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 133
11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 134
11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 135
11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 136
11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 137
11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 138
11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow............................................................. 139
12 Protection Selection Windows 141
12.1 VC4 Selection with ETH Cards....................................................... 141
13 Traffic Configuration 143
13.1 Port Configuration........................................................................... 143
13.2 IF4FE4GEB Port Configuration (Electrical and Optical)................. 145
13.3 Port Configuration for IFQ2G5........................................................ 147
ii A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 iii
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
iv A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 v
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
vi A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 vii
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
viii A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Table of Contents Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 ix
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Table of Contents
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
x A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1.1 Abbreviations
AS Alarm Suppression
AU Administrative Unit
CD Collision Detection
CE Communauté Européenne
CF Card Failure
CFG Configuration
CH Channel
CL Configuration Log
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 1
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
CLR Clear
CP Connection Protection
CT Card Type
DB Data Base
DC Direct Current
DEC Decimal
DEMUX Demultiplexer
DL Data Link
2 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
EM Element Manager
ETH Ethernet
FE Far End
FG Functional Group
FM Fault Management
FO Fiber Optic
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 3
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
FU Functional Unit
FW Firmware
HW HardWare
HEX Hexadecimal
HO Higher Order
ID Identification
IF Interface
4 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IS Intermediate System
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 5
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
LO Lower Order
LT Line Termination
6 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
MS Multiplex Section
NE Network Element
OH Overhead
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 7
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
OS Optical Section
P Protection
PP Path Protection
8 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
RD Read
RL Remote Loop
RS Regenerator Section
Rx Receiver
SC Connector Type
SD Signal Degraded
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 9
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SF Signal Fail
SW Software
T0 System Clock
10 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Abbreviations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TMP Timestamp
TP Termination Point
TU Tributary Unit
Tx Transmitter
UNEQ Unequipped
VC Virtual Container
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 11
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Abbreviations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
WR Write
12 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents,
an index, and a full-text search function.
or
or
In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN
manual.
Notes
Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.
If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding
SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases,
there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 13
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,
The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional
sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features,
such as:
• Virtual concatenation,
• Contiguous concatenation,
• EOW functions,
• Support of VLAN,
• IP / OSI tunneling,
• etc.
14 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack) soft-
ware,
• NE Proxy software,
• TNMS CT software,
[11210]
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 15
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
16 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3 General
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> NE Time...
Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values
are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second,
according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.
Current NE Time
The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the
MS Windows control panel.
The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time
settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 17
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> Network Element...
The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.
Value Ranges:
Name 48 Bytes
Location 64 Bytes
Type
Startup Info
18 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
NE Unique HW Code
Application Type
If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an
activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.
Persistency Time
In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.
This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be
reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.
Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The
default clear time is 10 s.
Log Overwrite
Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.
Fault
Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity
"Warning"):
enabled laser shutdown,
enabled port loopbacks,
deactivated ALS on optical interface cards,
active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration),
active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP,
2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of
IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 19
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
20 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 21
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
22 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 23
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
24 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 25
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
26 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 27
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at
startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.
Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the
threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities
below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.
For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is
selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.
By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm
summary.
28 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at
application termination.
Open at Startup
Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.
Time Display
Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to
the system time zone of the operation system.
Frequency Display
Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength or channel numbers) with optical
interfaces.
General
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 29
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...
30 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 31
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...
This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the
NE.
The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross
connections and SW management.
Top Section
32 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the
Stop symbol.
For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.
Bottom Section
When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors.
To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.
Syntax
• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given
explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.
• Script statements:
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters);
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters);
// <Comment> or /* <comment> */
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 33
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Example:
IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1);
refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.
• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The
keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for
performing a SET invoke is:
objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).
Example:
IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);
• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in
the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke
is:
objectInstance.Action (Parameters);
Example:
EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306),
CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));
• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script
configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or
commands. The syntax for the Wait command is:
Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);
Example: Wait(1000);
• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be
repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of
execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is:
Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user
stop>);
<Qst command 1>;
...
<Qst command n>;
EndLoop;
Examples:
Loop(50);
ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled);
EndLoop;
Loop(*);
faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11));
EndLoop;
SEQUENCE
(element 1, element 2, ... element n)
SEQUENCE OF BYTE
(byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)
34 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SET OF
(element 1, element 2, ..., element n)
CHOICE
<choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>
Example:
vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 35
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
36 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Extension Shelf Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
4 Extension Shelf
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...
This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be
added to the Module View.
1 Main Shelf
2 Microshelf #1
3 Microshelf #2
4 Microshelf #3
5 Microshelf #4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 37
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Extension Shelf
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using
the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
38 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Subrack Equipping Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
5 Subrack Equipping
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Information -> Possible Equipping...
This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible
equipping of every slot with cards.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 39
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Subrack Equipping
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Information -> Actual Equipping...
This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping
of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure
that the desired information can be found efficiently.
40 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Subrack Equipping Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...
This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all
configured cards:
ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 41
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Subrack Equipping
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the card symbol, by using the command Configuration ->
Card... of the popup menu
42 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Label Information Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 43
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Label Information
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
44 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Label Information Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 45
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Label Information
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a CLU card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
46 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Label Information Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 47
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Label Information
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack
or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card
Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
48 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Label Information Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 49
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Label Information
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
50 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
7 Card Configuration
This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and
selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.
This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or
protection if available).
If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly.
When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will
automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 51
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
EOW Active
52 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a CLU symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards need not have
selected the same clock pulse.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 53
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The slot number of the card involved in LO switching protection e.g. crossconnections, path
protection, non-intrusive path monitoring, etc.
This kind of protection is made on switching fabric cards, and it is basically made of a set of
two cross-connections from (Head End) or to (Tail End) the same resource.
54 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 55
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context
menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
56 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.
The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 57
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross
connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)
In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12
cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208,
211) can be cross connected.
Workaround:
For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and
configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070
SC subrack.
For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted
and configured at any other traffic slot.
Limitation:
In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and
#52 are invisible.
Reason:
Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63
ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.
Workaround:
If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at
another traffic slot but not on slot 301.
In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP)
it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch
card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross
connections already exists.
58 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol ->
Configuration -> Card...
Card State
enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Monitored channel NE
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 59
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out
simultaneously).
Used in Protection
AIS Insertion
Enables the AIS insertion to insert a manual AIS towards the port.
60 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 61
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.
Connection Reference
In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured
correctly.
62 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 63
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality.
All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.
Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings
( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.
64 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 65
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).
Laser Data:
Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.
66 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 67
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is
disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is
inserted, the ETH link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the
MAC on the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are
sent any longer in both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As
a consequence also the packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH ->
SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH
port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the
ETH link partner raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router
which considers a physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing
process (e.g. a redundant path is available).
68 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 69
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
70 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 71
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.
72 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 73
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
74 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Card Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
7.18 TP_Reservation
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Location
A list of the reserved TPs is presented. The list will contain the location of the TPs.
Object
TP Address
GMPLS interface information configured by the operator (e.g. TP reservation, local and
remote TE-Link identifiers)
Call name
Call Id
Egress
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 75
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Card Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Ingress
76 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8 Timing
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC...
In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each
timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing
always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is
used for the timing derivation.
A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a
timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization
reference.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 77
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3
timing source.
Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of
an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For
further information, see below ("Forced").
The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4.
The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.
Note:
T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:
• QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than
the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11-
SEC, 0-off
T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched
in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and
"DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).
Auto:
The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the
best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6
= very bad/do not use).
Forced:
You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second
arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected
timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after
expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning.
The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately.
The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry
of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.
If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the
Free Running mode.
78 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received
STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are
used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the
DNU display, the received value is the displayed.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 79
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8.2 T0 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...
• the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.
T1 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
80 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8.3 T1 Configuration
Timing References Tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...
Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status
Message (SSMs) information. Also it enables and displays available and selected rejected
SSMs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 81
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
WTR tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...
WTR Tab
Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.
T0 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
82 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8.4 T3 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC... -> T3 -> Configuration...
T3:
T3 2 MHz SSM
Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker.
This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM.
The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 83
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The 2 Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs. In this case, the SSM value is overrided.
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.
T3 Received SSMs
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
84 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Timing Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
8.5 T4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> SEC... -> T4 -> Configuration...
T4:
T4 Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.
Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see
above table).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 85
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Timing
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
86 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 87
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
88 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 89
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
90 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 91
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G
type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus
92 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 93
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Notes:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
94 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively ->
Subview...
This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 95
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the
card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or
VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
96 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Signal Label:
By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the
user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH
cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx).
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 97
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prepare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.
98 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric
card symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 99
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible by means of the path: Subrack -> Slot -> Card -> Port -> Subview...
100 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
10 Alarms
The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.
The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm
entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style
for labeling and sorting the list columns.
In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.
Current tab:
The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state
(acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes
(show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 101
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue
outline.
Context Menu
Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the
selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm
acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is
changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.
Alarm Counter
Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.
History tab:
The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is
online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one
particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm
raised
cleared (= no alarm)
102 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPU-
channel/Interface card take place by a list.
The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.
Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 103
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> NEAP...
The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and
allows to configure the alarm severities.
Column Description
104 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 105
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Communication Alarms
106 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications
Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 107
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Notes:
LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E
card and is not assigned to any port.
VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC
is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.
Equipment Alarms
108 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator
Guidelines).
Communication Alarms
ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination
ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.
ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client
ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination
ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.
ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client
GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 109
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T0 is correct, the card must
be replaced.
SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T4 is correct, the card must
be replaced.
SYNC LTS T1 #1.. Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
#8 T1 #1.. #8 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
T3 #1, #2 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
110 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.
VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.
VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 111
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.
Signal
P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If the alarm
persists, replace the card.
P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If still an EXC alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still an SD alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.
VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.
112 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 113
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list,
by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
Column Description
114 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Equipment Alarms
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 115
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... ->
1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
Column Description
116 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Equipment Alarms
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 117
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> TIF...
In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for
alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.
118 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Alarms Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column sorted by
Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one
object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)
Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of
one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)
TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one
alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)
Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by
object, location, TCA, time.)
Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by
object, location, TCA, event.)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 119
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Alarms
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Current Tab:
The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is
displayed.
Column Description
History Tab:
The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as
long as the LCT is online.
The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA
TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .
The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This
time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request
initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.
The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the
Registry).
120 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 121
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context
menu.
122 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 123
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
124 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 125
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
126 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 127
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.
128 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 129
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
130 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 131
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
132 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 133
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
134 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 135
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
136 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) ->
Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 137
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection ->
Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
138 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Traffic Flow Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 139
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
140 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Selection Windows Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 141
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Traffic Flow
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
142 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
13 Traffic Configuration
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 143
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
144 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 145
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Enable / Disable
146 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
Loopback (
Port classification
• non GMPLS
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 147
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
148 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 149
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...
OS tab:
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
150 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When
enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal.
If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one
single fiber), ALS should be enabled.
Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser
restart period.
If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.
Laser Frequency
SBS Suppression
Laser Data:
Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical
interface.
RS tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 151
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If checkbox is set:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
There is no influence to PM counters.
No checkbox setting:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which
defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.
Actually Transmitted:
This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.
Transmitted / Expected:
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received:
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
MS tab:
Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide
and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are
treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received
value is the displayed.
152 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock
source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.
By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as
timing source.
Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 153
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Configuration...
Supervision
If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.
Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad
Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
154 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
TTI Processing
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields
expected and received TTI are displayed.
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 155
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
For VC3:
This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...
For VC12:
The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close.
In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1) -
> Configuration...
Supervision
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
156 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types,
expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 157
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the
port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list ->
Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
158 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for
ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 159
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII
The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the
range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
160 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.
If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to
the link partner if
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 161
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will
not reduce the speed.
Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the
following will occur:
In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will
react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different
admission control or VC capacity.
Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN
equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off
Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).
Laser Data:
162 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 163
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list,
by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
P12
The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
164 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
disabled = no supervision
If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and
T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.
CRC-4 Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction.
If the switch is
disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is
only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.
Supervision/Retiming
This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled,
the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then
supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised
and is transmitted transparently.
The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset
between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the
SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a
reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.
CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If
the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC
Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination
port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the
termination port monitoring is enabled.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 165
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
13.11 E3 Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3
-> Configuration...
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
P3
The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
166 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Traffic Configuration Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an xxxxxx card symbol -> Information ->
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been completed.
Connection Reference
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 167
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Traffic Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Connection Reference
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
168 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Multiplex Structure Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
14 Multiplex Structure
This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a IF345
symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux) #n
symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 169
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Multiplex Structure
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
170 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
15 Cross Connections
In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross
connections).
3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point
CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 171
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more
than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more
than one CC.
7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the
end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF
card.
8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is
missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card
and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but
no other CC from the LO to an HO card.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment...
button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.
172 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> CC Plain List...
The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this
window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection
Graphic Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 173
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
174 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Add.
The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.
After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP A field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B’ field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection).
The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 175
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1,
1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group.
In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e.
1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).
The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross
connection list.
176 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Details...
After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed
below.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window
The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 177
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...
This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards,
sorted by cross connection protocols.
The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC
column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own
termination points.
The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC
column.
If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.
178 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Add...
List...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 179
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...
This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of
the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections
List, if applicable.
180 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...
This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.
The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.
The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a
TP B' termination point.
The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the
selected connection.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 181
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.
OH TP List tab:
Filter:
Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first
column).
Column Description
or not
182 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Cross Connections Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
OH Termination Point Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.
If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details
about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.
Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset
TPs button.
OH CC List tab:
Filter:
Column Description
TP A, TP B Termination points
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 183
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Cross Connections
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
184 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Protection Management Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
16 Protection Management
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -
> Protection...
This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the
currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.
Column Description
Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active
Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.
Create
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 185
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Protection Management
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Delete
186 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 plus 1 MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1
MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Working
Protecting
MSP Control:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 187
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 plus 1 MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Protection Mode
Operator Command
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
Availability State
MSP Activation
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.
188 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
18 1 to 1 MSP Protection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview... -
> 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Working
Protecting
MSP Control:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 189
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Protection Mode
Operator Command
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
Availability State
MSP Activation
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.
190 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 N MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
19 1 to N MSP Protection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP ->
Configuration...
Line Architecture
Protecting
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 191
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 N MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Working:
The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.
MSP Control:
Switching State
Protection Mode
Operator Command
Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching.
The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Availability State
MSP Activation
192 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 N MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 193
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 N MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...
Bitrate
Protection Port
Working Ports:
This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the
corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.
After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.
The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.
The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.
194 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 N MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list ->
Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...
Worker Priority
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 195
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 N MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...
After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected
Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.
The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP
window.
196 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
1 to 1 N MSP Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 ->
Subview...
This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 197
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 1 to 1 N MSP Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
198 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING ->
Configuration...
This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).
East / West
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 199
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2F-SPRING Control:
Protection Mode
Operator Command
Availability State
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
MSP Activation
Squelch...
200 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 201
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...
This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
East / West
202 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2F-SPRING Control:
Protection Mode
Operator Command
Availability State
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
MSP Activation
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 203
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Squelch...
204 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... -> 4F-
SPRING -> Configuration...
This window displays information about 4F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 205
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).
4F-SPRING Control:
Protection Mode
Availability State
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
MSP Activation
Squelch...
206 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 207
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology
In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
208 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.
Ring Map
Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.
2F-SPRING Configuration
4F-SPRING Configuration
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 209
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Squelch...
Squelch State
Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.
Squelch Table
Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.
210 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 211
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
212 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> n
x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 213
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
214 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 215
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
216 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 217
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
218 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Nut table
It is possible for the selected AU4 No. to enable or disable the Ring Switch, Span switch.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 219
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
220 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
2F/4F-SPRING Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Protection Mode
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays wether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked
state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive)
MSP Activation
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 221
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
222 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Link Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
21 Link Protection
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...
This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and
gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 223
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Link Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINK-
PROT -> Configuration...
Working
Protecting
Operator Command
224 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Link Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...
Main Shelf:
Working Port
Protecting Port
Extension Shelf:
SUBRACK
Working Port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 225
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Link Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Protecting Port
226 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Link Protection Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Identifier
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 227
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Link Protection
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
With the field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Identifier
228 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
22 Concatenations
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 229
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -
> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
230 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a
IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 ->
[VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 231
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 ->
VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
232 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 233
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview
This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
234 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...
VC12-2v Misc:
Supervision
Concatenation Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 235
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu
of an
ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G:
Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
SDH cards:
Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
236 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
With the IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards, the user
must select a template (see below).
For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4
multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.
IFOFES-E:
(via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4 -
> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card.
A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4.
With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.
SF2G5/SF10G:
(via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The
default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.
If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details
window.
The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.
The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.
The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection
window.
The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured
VC4-nv groups.
The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 237
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:
Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)
238 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button
a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 239
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...
Concatenation Type
Group ID
Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.
240 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...
This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.
Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be
selected. High order VC´s (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
GFP Assignment
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 241
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) ->
Modify Template...
Note:
Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.
242 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Concatenations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Slot -> Card -> Port -> VC<used LO–Concatenation> <id> Config...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 243
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Concatenations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
244 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
23 VLAN
2. VLAN C mode
Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators:
VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1
VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3
3. Mixed Mode
Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN
concentrator functionality as follows:
ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32
ETH port #4 - switched OFF
Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied
card configuration.
Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators
C1 and C2 are internally connected to.
Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.
These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via
the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.
Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream
direction):
• Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN
ID Assignment)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 245
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream
direction):
Type Field
• Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged
frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream
Priority Field
CFI Field
246 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
VLAN ID
Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs
(i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).
Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than
68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after
the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding
a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.
Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not
support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of
VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port
assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of
admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit
upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached
through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the
assigned downstream VC capacity.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 247
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP
group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has yet been done.
The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each VLAN
concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.
The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as
the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):
248 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected
BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of
the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow
control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the
possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the
activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the
incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 249
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close.
In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview
This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the
VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.
250 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the
Concatenation Group Templates window.
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 and
VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.
On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH
uplink port #1.
GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.
On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be
assigned.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 251
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3
(uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and
mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to
not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of
the VC.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
VLAN ID Assignment...
On VLAN ETH cards (ex. IFQGBEBxx), a port defines a set of VlanIDs to which VlanID2Gfp
assignments have to be done. So now, assignments consist on the following two step
assignments
VC4 Subview...
252 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 253
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on
ETH uplink port #3.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.
Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each
ETH port.
Note:
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
254 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH
#1 and #2).
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 & VC4-
nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink
direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping
frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not
overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the
VC.
The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 255
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all
VLAN & point to point GFPs)!
VLAN ID Assignment...
ETH Config...
VC4 Subview...
256 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
VLAN Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...
This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a
separate window, showing the assigned IDs.
The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.
With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.
Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the
concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 257
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) VLAN
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the
desired VLAN ID for that stream.
If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP
channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID.
In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is
grayed out. (The dim visable `0´ is a default that can be ignored.)
Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this
group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.
VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC3-
2v to that group before.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
VLAN Functionality
258 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
24 Virtual VCs
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 259
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
260 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the
IFOFES-E cards.
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (BIP2).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 261
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
262 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -
> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 263
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH
cards.
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
264 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 265
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation
Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply.
Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v ->
Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
266 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Virtual VCs Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 267
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Virtual VCs
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
268 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP Configurations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
25 GFP Configurations
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IEthernet card symbol in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Note:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 269
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GFP Configurations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...
This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.
270 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP Configurations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or
more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to
a single GFP group.
Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.
Notes:
The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be
done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s
granularity).
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 271
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GFP Configurations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user
must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header,
otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
The IF4FE4GE and IF4FE4GEB boards do not support an overall traffic exceeding the limit of
4 Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning ETH ports to GFP groups for a traffic rate
exceeding in total the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Ethernet counts for 1 Gb/s and each Fast Ethernet port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
So, if all the 4 Giga ports are already assigned to GFP groups, no Fast port can be assigned
to other GFP groups; if at least one Fast port needs to be provisioned, three Giga ports as a
maximum can be assigned to GFP channels.
LCT shows an error message when, assigning Logical ports to GFP groups, the 4 Gb/s limit is
exceeded and the requested operation is not performed.
The IF7FE2GEL2 and IF7FE2GEL2B boards cannot support on WAN side an overall traffic
exceeding the limit of 4Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning Logical ports to GFP
channels for a overall traffic rate exceeding the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Logical port counts for1 Gb/s and each Fast Logical port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
This means that if all the three Giga Logical ports have been already assigned to GFP
groups, as a maximum ten Fast Logical ports can be assigned to other GFP channels. If more
than 10 Fast Logical ports need to be provisioned, two Giga Logical ports as a maximum can
be assigned to GFP groups.
LCT shows an error message when, assigning Logical ports to GFP groups, the 4 Gb/s limit is
exceeded and the requested operation is not performed.
ETH Config...
272 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP Configurations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
VC4 Subview...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 273
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GFP Configurations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List...
(e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP
Assignment...
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
Note: The IF7FE2GEL2 and IF7FE2GEL2B boards cannot support on WAN side an overall
traffic exceeding the limit of 4Gb/s; therefore it is not allowed assigning Logical ports to GFP
channels for a overall traffic rate exceeding the mentioned limit.
In this calculation, each Giga Logical port counts for1 Gb/s and each Fast Logical port counts
for 0.1 Gb/s
This means that if all the three Giga Logical ports have been already assigned to GFP
groups, as a maximum ten Fast Logical ports can be assigned to other GFP channels. If more
than 10 Fast Logical ports need to be provisioned, two Giga Logical ports as a maximum can
be assigned to GFP groups.
LCT shows an error message when, assigning Logical ports to GFP groups, the 4 Gb/s limit is
exceeded and the requested operation is not performed.
274 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GFP Configurations Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
ETH Config...
VC4 Subview...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 275
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GFP Configurations
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
276 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
26 LCAS
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> LCAS State...
This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.
Filter:
Selected Item:
Sink
Source
Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 277
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
278 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation
(with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...
This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the
associated TPs from the list of available TPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 279
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...
Supervision
Concatenation Type
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set
to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.
280 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no
influence to the alarms of the included VCs.
Concatenation Type
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is
set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 281
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... ->
Supervision
Concatenation Type
Reserved GMPLS
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have.
If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 7, then an alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.
282 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... ->
Type
Group ID
Member TPs
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 283
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).
284 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 285
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... ->
LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
286 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (B3).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
LCAS State:
Sink
Source
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Enabled:
TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 287
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
288 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -
> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n ->
Configuration...
Supervision
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 289
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (BIP2).
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.
Source
Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote
station.
Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to
"Active".
To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases
the capacity in outgoing direction.
Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the VC12
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
290 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
LCAS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TTI Processing
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Enabled:
TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 291
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) LCAS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
292 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
27 MCF General
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...
This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message
communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.
Context Menu:
In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 293
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...
Activate Tunnel
Address Type
The Address Type of the system that will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a
OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Source IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
Destination IP Address
Encapsulation method
The DC-RSVP IP encapsulation method of RSVP packets, which are required for out-of-band
signaling.
Tunnel TTL
The Time To Live that will be set in the tunnel, the value of the field may be changed at any
time.
294 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Tunnel Security
Tunnel TOS
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 295
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...
Notes:
When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be
reestablished.
Layer 4 (Transport):
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this
packet from the opposite station.
296 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by
the opposite station was received.
Layer 3 (NSAP):
Area Address
The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is
mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the
length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN
planning.
Note:
System ID
Note:
The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.
Note:
Layer 3 (CLNS):
Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is
forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at
least 0.5 seconds.
Routing Principle
Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only
(L1).
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 297
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...
Remote T Selector
Local T Selector
Connection Type
Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming
= sent from the remote system).
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
298 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF General Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the
opposite station.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 299
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF General
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...
This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.
300 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF CLNS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
28 MCF CLNS
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...
This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.
Destination Areas
Address Prefix
displays the address part of the destination area.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 301
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF CLNS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Destination Systems
NSAP Address
displays the NSAP of the destination system.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacencies
displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.
Adjacency ID
displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.
302 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF CLNS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...
The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.
Display Meaning
Raised The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 303
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF CLNS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Cleared No overload
Display Meaning
Raised The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.
Cleared No overload
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.
Congestion Discards
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.
Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.
Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NE’s area, because the
maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.
Octets Received
Octets Sent
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.
304 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF CLNS Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.
Segments Received
Segments Sent
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.
Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 305
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF CLNS
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
306 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
29 MCF DCC
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...
In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4
ports.
DCC List
The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.
Display Meaning
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 307
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.
308 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created
and deleted here.
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
External Domain
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.
Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 309
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Default = 1
Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Interface Type
Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE
must be set on Network and the other one to User.
Line Code
Note:
In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.
The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address
Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
310 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
Version Skew
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Area Mismatch
Octets Received
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 311
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Octets Sent
Frames Received
Frames Sent
312 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 313
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
314 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF DCC Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode."
(Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 315
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF DCC
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1)
and (8,7,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1)
and (7,3,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1)
and (9,9,1)]
HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1),
(6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1),
(8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
316 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF Ethernet Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
30 MCF Ethernet
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
SNPA Address
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
External Domain
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 317
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF Ethernet
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address
is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).
The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable
Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
318 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF Ethernet Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
Version Skew
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Octets Sent
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 319
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF Ethernet
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Frames Received
Frames Sent
320 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF Ethernet Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 321
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF Ethernet
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
SNPA Address
322 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF Ethernet Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
SNPA Address
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 323
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF Ethernet
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode.
324 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF OSI/IP Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
31 MCF OSI/IP
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...
This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel
NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 325
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF OSI/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
Configuration:
Activate Tunnel
External Domain
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.
Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
326 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF OSI/IP Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Default = 1
Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP
Reachable Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 327
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF OSI/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
Version Skew
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Octets Sent
328 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF OSI/IP Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Frames Received
Frames Sent
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 329
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF OSI/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
330 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
MCF OSI/IP Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 331
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) MCF OSI/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
(with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
332 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
32 IP Settings
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...
This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the
SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
(Identifier = SNMP-index)
eth0:
for Ethernet Interface
(unnumbered index 2)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 333
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
lo:0:
for Local loopback interface
(unnumbered index 1)
dcc:
Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR.
Each device could be configured as
numbered or unnumbered interface
334 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 335
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.
336 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...
This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to
configure static routes manually.
Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following
information is shown:
Column Description
Direct
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 337
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Indirect
The destination IP address is reachable via
the Next Hop IP address.
Invalid
removes the route from the active routing
process.
Add...
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify
window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
338 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 339
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.
340 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).
OSPF Router ID
"A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. The router ID is a
read only parameter and it must be equal to the loopback address (lo:0 addess.)
Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Default value for this parameter is Enabled, but in order to work with the OSPF it is
necessary to enable each interface on the Interface config window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 341
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Maximum Delay
The maximum delay before the Routing Table is recalculated following a change to the Link
State Database. (Recalculation is delayed to reduce the frequency of recalculations of the
Routing Table). This parameter has units of milliseconds.
Pause Frequence
342 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
LSA Tab
Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in the link-state
database.
Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.
Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.
AS_External LSAs
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 343
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The router's support for Opaque LSA types. This value cannot be changed when the Entity
MIB is active and in oper state up.
The value determines the interval between refreshes of type-5 and type-11 AS-external LSAs,
and is defaulted to the OSPF standard default of 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
The 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all type-11 LSAs in the external Link State Database.
Update Tab
This parameter can be used to override the above routing calculation delay when the number
of updates to the Link State Database reaches a threshold value.
This parameter can be used to interrupt a full routing calculation when the number of pending
updates to the Link State Database has reached a threshold value.
This parameter can be used to optimize the performance of the Routing Calculator in the
situation where updates that are pending to the Link State Database solely concern inter-area
or AS-external routes.
344 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This parameter is used to configure the threshold value for which recalculation by multiple
incremental SPF updates is no longer quicker than a single full recalculation.
The number of updates that are pending addition to the Link State Database.
The number of updates that have been merged into the Link State Database since the last
routing calculation.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 345
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.
Column Description
346 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.
Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 347
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
348 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 349
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
350 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...
This window allows to add an entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 351
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...
Column Description
352 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...
Column Description
Area The 32 bit identifier for the Stub Area. On creation, this can
be derived from the instance.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 353
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .
Note :
It is only possible to create an entry when the OSPF already exists.
The operator must create two entries:
1. First the Operator must create an entry in AreaTable:
Column Description
354 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Add...
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 355
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates... -> Add..
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.
Note :
It is only possible to create an entry when the OSPF already exists.
The operator must create two entries:
1. First the Operator must create an entry in AreaTable:
Column Description
356 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 357
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration
The parameters in the table columns and their meaning are reported here below:
IP Address
Area
State
- Designated Router,
Administrative State
358 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Priority of this interface. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.
Subnet Mask
Operational status
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout [1..65535 s]
Timeout interval. The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen
before it's neighbors declare the router down.
Interface
Index
Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.
Remote port
For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index assigned to this link by the
remote peer.
Add...
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 359
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -
> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.
The parameters in the table columns and their meaning are reported here below:
IP Address
Area
State
360 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
- Designated Router,
Administrative State
Priority of this interface. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.
Subnet Mask
Operational status
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout [1..65535 s]
Timeout interval. The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen
before it's neighbors declare the router down.
Interface
Index
Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.
Remote port
For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index assigned to this link by the
remote peer.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 361
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Type
Transit delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
Retransmission interval
Designated router
Events
The number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred
Password type
The authentication type specified for an interface. Additional authentication types may be
assigned locally.
Password
The cleartext password used as an OSPF Authentication key when simplePassword security
is enabled.
362 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If the key length is shorter than 8 octets, the agent will left adjust and zero fill to 8 octets.
Poll interval
The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non-
broadcast multi-access neighbor
The total number of link-local link state advertisements in this interface's link-local link state
database.
Administartive Groups
This field specifies administrative group membership for this interface, in terms of a bit mask.
The time this interface will delay a LSU packet, in order to add more LSAs to the packet
before sending.
This is the maximum packet size in bytes for packets sent over the network interface.
Self-originated LSAs are periodically reflooded into the routing domain, to add to the
robustness of the OSPF protocol. This value determines the interval between refreshes of
LSAs that are only flooded over this interface (type-9 opaque LSAs) and is defaulted to the
OSPF standard default of 1800 seconds (30 minutes)
QoS Support
Defines whether Traffic Engineering LSAs can be originated for this interface.
TE LSA Flooding
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 363
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -
> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.
Numbered interface
Interface Index
364 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
For the purpose of easing the instancing of addressed and address less interfaces; this
variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and the corresponding value of if
Index for interfaces having no IP Address
Index
Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.
IP Address
Administrative Status
Area
Type
Router Priority
The priority of this interface. Used in multi-access networks, this field is used in the
designated router election algorithm. The value 0 signifies that the router is not eligible to
become the designated router on thisparticular network. .
Transit delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this
interface
Retransmission interval
Hello Interval
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface
Timeout
Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password type
The authentication type specified for an interface. Additional authentication types may be
assigned locally.
Password
The cleartext password used as an OSPF Authentication key when simplePassword security
is enabled. If the key length is shorter than 8 octets, the agent will left adjust and zero fill to 8
octets.
Poll interval
The larger time interval, in seconds, between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non-
broadcast multi-access neighbor
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 365
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry. The value of the mask is an IP
address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0.
Authentic data
This data is passed opaquely to the DC authentication interface where it can be used to assist
with authentication decisions.
366 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 367
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration.
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.
Column Description
368 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Transmit Timer delay The time this interface will delay a LSU
packet, in order to add more LSAs to the
packet before sending.
Maximum Packet Size Maximum transfer unit (MTU) for the network
interface.
Add...
Modify
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 369
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
370 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to modify a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
The parameters in the table columns and their meaning are reported here below:
Area
Virtual Neighbour
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 371
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The time this interface will delay a LSU packet, in order to add more LSAs to the packet
before sending.
Transit delay
Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet over this
interface.
Passive
Interface
Self-originated LSAs are periodically reflooded into the routing domain, to add to the
robustness of the OSPF protocol.
TE LSA Flooding
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password Type
Password
Password entry.
Admin Status
Authentic Data
372 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 373
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
374 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 375
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
376 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.
The parameters in the table columns and their meaning are reported here below:
IP Address
Index
On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.
Neighbour Router ID
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 377
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
LSA Import
Type-of-Service Routing
State
Events
Number of times this neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.
Hello Suppressed
Admin status
Operational Status
LSA Requests
The number of LSAs we have requested from this neighbour for which we are still awaiting a
response.
378 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours...
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 379
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.
380 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 381
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.
Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.
382 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...
This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 383
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.
384 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 385
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.
Column Description
386 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 387
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Column Description
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window
388 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
-> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 389
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Switching
Encoding type
The MAX LSP bandwidth on this interface, at the selected priority level, in IEEE floating point
format, used by CSPF to calculate constrained routes. The units are bytes per second.
The last advertised MAX LSP Bandwidth at the selected priority level for this interface.
This parameter determines the minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
MTU Size
This field reports the Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
The last advertised Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
390 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 391
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Switching….
->Details
The MAX LSP bandwidth on this interface, at the selected priority level, in IEEE floating point
format, used by CSPF to calculate constrained routes. The units are bytes per second.
The last advertised MAX LSP Bandwidth at the selected priority level for this interface.
This parameter determines the minimal percentage change of Min LSP Bandwidth
392 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Encoding type
MTU Size
This field reports the Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
The last advertised Maximum Transmission Unit size for this type of traffic.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 393
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (256 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
33.26 Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) ->Performance
394 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).
OSPF Router ID
Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is
the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.
Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at
least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 395
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs
propagate default routes only when these are entered.
Information Fields:
Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently
stored in the link-state database.
Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.
Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.
396 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 397
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.
Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.
398 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 399
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...
400 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 401
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Add...
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.
402 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 403
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration
Column Description
404 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Add...
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 405
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -
> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.
Notes:
To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP
Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP
Address field is grayed out.
The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if
OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be
configured to the default values:
Router Priority 1
406 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Transit Delay 1
Retransmission Interval 5
Hello Interval 10
Timeout 40
Password none
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 407
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...
Column Description
408 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces...
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 409
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Add...
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
410 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 411
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.
Column Description
412 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 413
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours...
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.
Column Description
414 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 415
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.
Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.
416 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...
This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.
Column Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 417
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.
418 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 419
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.
Column Description
420 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 421
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) OSPF Settings (128 Mb SCOH Card)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
-> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.
422 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TCP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
35 TCP Settings
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...
This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070
and all the currently established TCP connections.
There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
Details...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 423
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) TCP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details
window.
Notes:
All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used
internally.
The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also
be displayed via the
Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration
-> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....
Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with
"54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.
424 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
TCP Settings Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info
list.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 425
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) TCP Settings
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
426 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
36 Data
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack
symbol -> Subrack Data...
In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack.
Value range: 0...128 characters
The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 427
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -
> Information -> ASIC Data...
428 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card
or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the
port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic
symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or
more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object
configurations within the same card
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).
Copy Items
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 429
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Alarm configurations
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
430 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
(except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...
This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty
equivalent slots.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.
Copy Data
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 431
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Config DB Management...
The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in
a non-volatile memory.
You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You
can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a
card/software change or failure.
NE State
Configuration ID
Config DB Action
Possible Settings:
432 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Active no
Idle no
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 433
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened
window, select the relevant file) -> Open.
Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.
434 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) ->
Save.
Note:
In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 435
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Logs... -> NE Logs...
The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.
If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute
window.
The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical
event log.
Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar
or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.
436 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Data Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object) -
> Show Details...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 437
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Data
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
438 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
37 Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 439
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.
Multicast Frames
Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.
Dropped Frames Tx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong.
Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.
Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes)
Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not
assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.
Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.
The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
440 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals
are also contained in the list.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 441
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Performance -> AU4 PJE...
This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h
performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Current
The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
442 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The
last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The
last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min
intervals are also contained in the list.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 443
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
444 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower
threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 445
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
446 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 447
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
448 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 449
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
450 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 451
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
452 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 453
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
454 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 455
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
456 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 457
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
458 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.
Current tab:
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 459
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after
10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
460 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 461
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
462 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.
Current tab:
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 463
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals.
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
464 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 465
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
466 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a IF4FE4GEB symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu
of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 467
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after
10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
468 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 469
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
470 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a IF4FE4GEB symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu
of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 471
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
472 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 473
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
474 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -
> VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 475
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
476 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 477
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
478 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -
> VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 479
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:
Display Meaning
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
480 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 481
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
482 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Performance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP
Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 483
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Performance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are
also contained in the list.
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
484 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
38 GMPLS
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 485
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
AS Number [0..65535]
The number identifying the autonomous system (AS) which this node belongs to.
The TTL set on messages originating at this node. A value of 0 indicates this number is
determined by other means.
The minimum granularity to allow an internal timer to be set in the RSVP product code.
This RSVP (ReSerVation Protocol) value, R, which is used to set the average interval
between refresh path and resv messages.
The RSVP value, K, which is the number of unresponded Path or Resv refresh attempts
which must be made, spaced by the refresh interval before the state is deemed to have timed
out.
Wait-to-restore timer value for this call. The timer is started when a defect condition is cleared
and runs for the configured time. On expiry, reversion switching is initiated if the defect
condition is still cleared.
The setup priority to apply to LSPs which are not signalling this parameter. 0 represents the
highest priority, 7 the lowest.
The holding priority to apply to LSPs which are not signalling this parameter. 0 represents the
highest priority, 7 the lowest.
Admin Status
Oper Status
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing scheme for PATH and
PATH-TEAR messages it sends.
Use Notify
A flag to indicate that RSVP should attempt to insert a Notify Request object in all Path
requests that is sends as ingress and all Resv requests that it sends as egress. The precise
behavior is modified by a user exit called by the RSVP code.
486 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The percentage increase in the rapid retransmission interval for each consecutive
unacknowledged RSVP Notify message. A value of 0 indicates a constant retransmission
rate.
Allow Encapsulation
A flag to indicate that RSVP should support the use of IP encapsulation of RSVP packets,
which are required for out-of-band signaling.
The percentage increase in the rapid retransmission interval for each consecutive
unacknowledged RSVP Initial Path message.
The rapid retransmission interval in milliseconds before an Initial Path message is first resent
if no acknowledgement is received.
UNI
A flag to indicate whether the local node supports UNI signaling messages.
Restart Capable
A flag to indicate whether the local node should advertise itself as restart capable. This should
be set to true if fault-tolerance is enabled in GMPLS or if the node supports recovery
procedures.
The time in milliseconds that the local node takes to restart RSVP-TE and the communication
channel used for RSVP communication. This is advertised to neighbours in the Restart_Cap
object in Hello messages.
Refresh Slew
The numerator and the denominator of the fraction, SlewMax, which is the maximum
allowable increase in the refresh interval, R, to prevent state timeout while changing R. R is
increased by this fraction until it reaches the new desired value.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 487
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The period of time in milliseconds that the local node would like neighbors to take to
resyncronize RSVP and GMPLS forwarding information after the re-establishment of Hello
connectivity. This is advertised to neighbours in the Restart_Cap object in Hello messages.
The mininum period of time in milliseconds that RSVP should wait for a restart capable
neighbor to regain Hello connectivity before invoking procedures related to communication
loss.
The time in milliseconds that GMPLS will wait for graceful deletion to complete before the
forced deletion procedure is used instead.
Specifies the action that an egress node should take in the graceful deletion procedure on
receipt of a Path message containing an Admin Status object with the D and R bits set.
NNI
A flag to indicate whether the local node supports NNI signaling messages.
- includeLabelHeader: the LABEL_SET object contains concatenated LABEL objects with the
object headers.
This object is used to enable traps for the Label Set style oper_status object.
- leaveLSPs: All nodes should suppress refreshes and switch to the new format while
refreshes are suppressed.
- tearLSPs: Any LSPs using label sets will be deleted before switching all nodes to the new
format, and any new LSPs using label sets will be dropped/rejected until theswitch is
complete.
The desired operational state of support for the extended PROTECTION object.
488 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Error Action
This field is used by RSVP to determine whether it should take any special action following
certain types of local errors. Each bit of this flags field corresponds to an error and a
corresponding action.
Behavior Flags
This field is used by RSVP to determine whether it should set the Path State Removed flag on
a PathErr (and therefore remove corresponding state and generate a PathTear). Each bit of
this flags field corresponds to a situation where DC-RSVP may generate a PathErr.
DC-RSVP has received a PathErr message with the Path State Removed flag set.
DC-RSVP has received a PathErr message with the Path State Removed flag unset.
LDB Preempted
Routing Error
Session Expired
A route has been removed and DC-RSVP is unable to start local repair.
An interface has been removed and DC-RSVP is unable start local repair.
Unable To Refresh
DC-RSVP has received a ResvErr at the Egress node containing a REROUTING object and
this is to be turned round into a PathErr.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 489
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The incoming MPLS data interface for an LSP has been deactivated.
The outgoing MPLS data interface for an LSP has been deactivated.
Note: Some of the RSVP parameters can also be configured per interface. In this case, the
parameter configured per interface overwrites the parameter value configured in this window.
490 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 491
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The persistent tunnel retry interval. This is the interval between the first failure of a persistent
tunnel and the first attempt to re-establish the tunnel. A value of 0 indicates retrying is not
supported.
Thus a value of 10 increases the retry interval by ten per cent of the previous value. A value
of 0 indicates a constant retry rate.
The maximum number of retry attempts that will be made before a persistent tunnel is demed
inoperable. Once in this state, a management agent should set mplsTunnelAdminStatus to
'up' to attempt to reestablish the tunnel.
A value of -1 indicates infinite retry, so a persistent tunnel will continue to be retried until it is
successfully established.
A boolean indicating whether DC-TPM should allow tunnels to be deleted using the graceful
deletion procedure.
A flag to indicate whether RSVP should inform DC-TPM about LSPs for which this node is
transit.
A flag to indicate whether DC-TPM should support calculation of hops for the
mplsTunnelCHopTable or for automatically provisioned e2e protecting LSPs.
The desired operational state of support for the extended PROTECTION object.
UNI
Flags field indicating whether a RESV_CONFIRM object should be included in RSVP Resv
messages.
MPLS
Flags field indicating whether a RESV_CONFIRM object should be included in RSVP Resv
messages.
492 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Operational Status
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 493
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Monitoring Type
Error Log
The monitoring type to be used for all calls on the NE Configuration Error Log as reported.
494 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
IPS Tracing
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 495
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window describes the GMPLS traffic engineering interface attributes for Surpass hiT
network elements
Local Endpoint ID
For a DDRP level link, this field can be used to configure the Routing Controller ID of the local
endpoint of a link when this router is not the local endpoint.
Local Index
Name
Type
Port Classifier
496 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Card Status
Card Type
Administrative Status
Operational Status
The operational status of the network interface indicating the registration status with the
GMPLS Controller.
TE Link
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Metric [1..65535]
The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations.
SRLG Ids
This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. An SRLG is identified with a 32-bit number
that is unique within an IGP domain. Zero is a valid SRLG number.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 497
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window describes the GMPLS traffic management information applicable to a particular
network interface.
Local endpoint id
Local Index
498 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Name
Type
Administrative Status
Remote Router ID
For a point to point interface, this specifies the IPv4 router ID of the remote peer.
Remote Index
Remote interface index. For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index
assigned to this link by the remote peer, or for a DDRP level link, the remote endpoint node.
Port Classifier
Card Type
Card Status
Operational status
TE Link
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
MPLS Tunnel
Loop Back
Point to Point
Broadcast
Multicast
Unum
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 499
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Nbma
Bundle
Component
Inter Domain
500 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TE link tab
This window describes the GMPLS traffic management information applicable to a particular
network interface
Metric [0..65535]
The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations.
Unprotected
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 501
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Dedicated 1+1
SRLG ID
This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. An SRLG is identified with a 32-bit number
that is unique within an IGP domain.
Index
502 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
MPLS tab
This window describes the GMPLS traffic management information applicable to a particular
network interface
Default period in milliseconds between sending Hello messages to all neighbors on this
interface. If this is set to 0, no Hello messages are sent by this interface.
Percentage increase in hello period after each Hello message sent when the hello session
with the neighbor has timed out.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 503
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Number of hello periods which may pass without receiving a successful Hello message from a
partner before the Hello session times out.
Number of hello periods which may pass after the Hello session times out before Hello
messages cease.
The average interval, in milliseconds, between Path and Resv refresh messages for LSPs
which use this interface for RSVP-signalled data. A value of 0 indicates that the globally
configured value in the RSVP MIB table is used for this interface.
The RSVP value, K, which is the number of unresponded Path or Resv refresh attempts
which must be made, spaced by the refresh interval before the state is deemed to have timed
out.
Refresh Slew
The numerator / denominator of the fraction, SlewMax, which is the maximum allowable
increase in the refresh interval, R, to prevent state timeout while changing R. R is increased
by this fraction until it reaches the new desired value.
The RSVP value, Kb, which is the number of refresh timeout periods after which blockade
state is deleted.
The average interval, in milliseconds, between Summary refresh messages for LSPs which
use this interface for RSVP-signalled data.
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing.
A flag to indicate that RSVP should use the hop by hop addressing.
Indicates the maximum time that a single message sent out of this interface should be
delayed for in order to include it in a Bundle Message.
The percentage increase in the rapid retransmission interval for each consecutive
unacknowledged RSVP message sent out of this interface. A value of 0 indicates a constant
retransmission rate.
504 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Srefr Msgs
No Req Ack
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 505
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Bandthwidth tab
This window describes the GMPLS traffic management information applicable to a particular
network interface
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the first priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
506 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the second priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the third priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the fourth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the fifth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the sixth priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface . This is the true link capacity . The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the seventh priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface, at the eight priority evel, in IEEE floating point
format, used to calculate constrained routes. Each value will be less than or equal to the
maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. This is the true link capacity. The units are
bytes per second.
Maximum bandwidth
The maximum bandwidth on this interface, in IEEE floating point format, used to calculate
constrained routes. This is the true link capacity. The units are bytes per second.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 507
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
In order to increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the
minimal percentage change of maximum reservable bandwidth that causes a new Opaque
LSA to be originated.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the first priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the second priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the third priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the fourth priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the fifth priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the sixth priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the seventh priority level for this interface.
The last advertised Unreserved Bandwidth at the eight priority level for this interface.
The maximum bandwidth on this interface In order to increase performance and reduce
network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of maximum
bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
The maximum reservable bandwidth on this interface. In order to increase performance and
reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of
maximum reservable bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
The unreserved bandwidth on this interface. In order to increase performance and reduce
network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal percentage change of unreserved
bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
The MAX LSP bandwidth for the various switching descriptors on this interface In order to
increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal
percentage change of MAX LSP bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
508 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The Min LSP bandwidth for the various switching descriptors on this interface In order to
increase performance and reduce network traffic, this parameter determines the minimal
percentage change of Min LSP bandwidth that causes a new Opaque LSA to be originated.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 509
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Metric
The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations.
SRLG IDs
This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. An SRLG is identified with a 32-bit number
that is unique within an IGP domain. Zero is a valid SRLG number.
510 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window provide the entries containing management information applicable to a particular
network interface
Local Endpoint ID
Configurable by Siemens Service staff only - local endpoint ID is always 0.0.0.0 read only.
Local Index
Name
Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 511
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Administrative Status
Remote Router ID
For a point to point interface, this specifies the IPv4 router ID of the remote peer.
Remote Index
Remote interface index. For a point to point interface, this specifies the interface index
assigned to this link by the remote peer, or for a DDRP level link, the remote endpoint node.
Note:
After setting all fields in the first window, with "next" button a second window will appear.
Metric [0..65535]
The Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations.
SRLG ID
This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. An SRLG is identified with a 32-bit number
that is unique within an IGP domain. Zero is a valid SRLG number.
512 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window describes the GMPLS Call interface attributes for Surpass hiT network elements.
Index
Values of hitCallIndex.
Administrative Status
Operational Status
Indicates the actual operational status of this call, which is typically but not limited to, a
function of the state of individual tunnels of this call.
Type
Source
Destination
Protection Class
Name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 513
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions; interface identifier.
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions; interface identifier.
Ingress Label
The ingress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
Egress Label
The egress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
514 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window provides the user to create an entry in the table that represents a call.
Index
Values of hitCallIndex.
Administrative Status
Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 515
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Source
Destination
Name
Description
Deletion Mode
Whether to use forced or graceful deletion to delete the LSPs in this call.
Protection Class
516 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Traffic tab
This window provides the user to create an entry in the table that represents a call.
Reversion
Whether or not to use reversion to the initial working and protecting LSPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 517
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SDH NCC
Requested Number of Contiguous Components. Indicates the number of identical SDH VCs
that are requested to be concatenated.
This field indicates the number of signals that are requested to be virtually concatenated.
This field is a bit field indicating the number of identical signals that are requested for the LSP.
518 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Routing tab
This window provides the user to create an entry in the table that represents a call.
Ingress Label
The ingress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions; interface identifier.
Egress Label
The egress label to be used. It is the same for both directions; VC identifier.
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions; interface identifier.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 519
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Diversity Type
Index into the TunnelHopTable entry that specifies the explicit route hops for the initial
working LSP in this call.
Index into the TunnelHopTable entry that specifies the explicit route hops for the initial
protecting LSP in this call.
520 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> > Call List Add
button, Routing tab, select Working Hop List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the explicit route hops for
the initial working LSP.
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
This value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Hop Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 521
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
522 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> > Call List Add
button, Routing tab, select Working Hop List button
This window provides the user to add an entry in the table that specifies the explicit route
hops for the initial working LSP
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 523
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
Note:
If the user configures a hop list, the following warning is displayed to the user: "All hops from
ingress to egress needs to be configured by the user. Partially specified routes could lead to
unexpected results".
524 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Add
button, Routing tab, select Protecting Hop List button.
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the explicit route hops for
the initial protecting LSP
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Hop Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 525
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
526 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Add
button, Routing tab, select Protecting Hop List button.
This window provides the user to add an entry in the table that specifies the explicit route
hops for the initial protecting LSP
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 527
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
528 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List> Select
the call, press Modify button
This window provides the user to modify an entry in the table that represents a call.
Administrative Status
Destination
Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 529
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Deletion mode
Whether to use forced or graceful deletion to delete the LSPs in this call.
Protection Class
530 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Traffic tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List> Select
the call, press Modify button
This window provides the user to modify an entry in the table that represents a call.
Total Recoveries
The total number of automatic recoveries that have been done for the call.
Reversion
Whether or not to use reversion to the initial working and protecting LSPs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 531
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SDH NCC
Requested Number of Contiguous Components. Indicates the number of identical SDH VCs
that are requested to be concatenated.
This field indicates the number of signals that are requested to be virtually concatenated.
This field is a bit field indicating the number of identical signals that are requested for the LSP.
532 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Routing tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List> Select
the call, press Modify button
This window provides the user to modify an entry in the table that represents a call.
Ingress Label
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions.
Egress Label
The ingress label port to be used. It is the same for both directions.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 533
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Diversity Type
534 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Events tab
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List> Select
the call, press Modify button
This window provides the user to modify an entry in the table that represents a call.
Event Index
Event Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 535
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Event Time
The time at which the event occured. This is presented as the value of SysUpTime when the
event occured.
536 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call List Select
call, Modify button, Routing tab, Working Hop List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that
Specifies the explicit route hops for the initial Current working/protecting list
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
This value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 537
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Hop Type
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
538 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list> Select
the call, press LSP list button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels that are
part of the same call, as well as their statuses
LSP Index
LSP Instance
Ingress LSR ID
Egress LSR ID
LSP Type
Failure Count
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 539
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Initial
Clear: otherwise.
Initial LSP tunnels are kept signaled after failures if the call is revertive
Current
Set: the LSP tunnel is part of the current working-protecting LSP tunnels pair
Clear: otherwise.
Working
This flag shows the way LSP tunnel is signale in the network: its value is meaningless in case
the Current flag is not Set (Clear).
Active
Failure
Errors
Dow trap
Init working
This flag makes sense when the initial flag is set only
Note :
When an LSP coming from the same type of protection schemes is relocated, the LCT,
clicking on the relocate button, shows the following warning message:"If Lockout Of
Protection or Forced Switch To Protection are not set the operation could be rejected".
540 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
As before if a relocation list is created without doing one of the two commands (LP or FtP), a
message reporting "The Operation is not allowed" is showed by LCT and the NE refuses the
operation.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 541
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol>Configuration>GMPLS> Call list Select the
call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Relocation LSP List button
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the desired explicit route
hops for the LSP to be relocated.
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Prefix Len
This value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
Hop Type
542 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Include
Computation
1: Dynamic
2: Explicit
If this value is set to dynamic, then the user should only specify the source and destination of
the path and expect that the CSPF will calculate the remainder of the path. If this value is set
to explicit, the user should specify the entire path for the tunnel to take.
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 543
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Select the call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Relocation LSP List button >
Add List button
This window allows the user to add a new entry in the table
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
Address Type
Router ID
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
Hop Type
544 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Read Only - This parameter can not be configurable – always set ad strict.
Include
Note:
If the user configures a hop list, the following warning is displayed to the user: "All hops from
ingress to egress needs to be configured by the user. Partially specified routes could lead to
unexpected results".
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 545
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Select the call, press LSP list button, select the LSP and click on Details button
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
LSP Name
Encoding
546 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Admin Status
Oper Status
Indicates the actual operational status of this call, which is typically but not limited to, a
function of the state of individual tunnels of this call.
Description
Is Interface
Denotes whether or not this tunnel corresponds to an interface represented in the interfaces
group table.
Interface Index
This value contains the LSR-assigned ifIndex which corresponds to an entry in the interfaces
table. Otherwise this variable should contain the value of zero indicating that a valid ifIndex
was not assigned to this tunnel interface.
Deletion Mode
Secondary
Indicates that the requested LSP is a secondary LSP and not a primary LSP.
Del In Progress
Determines the setting of the Admin Status flags in the Admin Status object.
Down
Determines the setting of the Admin Status flags in the Admin Status object.
Testing
Determines the setting of the Admin Status flags in the Admin Status object.
Reflect
Determines the setting of the Admin Status flags in the Admin Status object.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 547
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Traffic tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
Type of the source TNA address of this tunnel. This field is used for UNI. For standard MPLS
and GMPLS, this field must be set to none.
Type of the destination TNA address of this tunnel. This field is used for UNI. For standard
MPLS and GMPLS, this field must be set to none.
548 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Routing tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
Setup Prio
Switching Type
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 549
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Path Computation
Is SPC
This flag indicates whether the tunnel is an OIF soft permanent connection (SPC).
GP ID
This object indicates the payload carried by the LSP. It is only required when GMPLS will be
used for this LSP
Sink TP
TunnelEgressLabel
LCT only displays the first 10 bytes of this field.They represent the QST address of the sink
TP at the partner NE.
Omit ERO
Indicates whether the explicit route object should be omitted from the Path message when the
tunnel consists of just one loose hop.
Indicates that Crankback End to End rerouting should be enabled on this LSP.
Setting this flag will cause Rerouting information to be returned to the ingress node on
PathErrs and Notifications.
Fast Reroute
This bitmask indicates optional session values for the GMPLS tunnels in this call.
This flag indicates that the any tunnel hop may choose to reroute this tunnel without tearing it
down.
Merging Permitted
This flag permits transit routers to merge this session with other RSVP sessions for the
purpose of reducing resource overhead on downstream transit routers, thereby providing
better network scalability.
Is Persistent
Indicates whether this tunnel should be restored automatically after a failure occurs.
Is Pinned
This flag indicates whether the loose routed hops of this tunnel are to be pinned.
Record Route
This flag indicates whether or not the signaling protocol should remember the tunnel path
after it has been signaled.
550 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Protection tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
Protecting
Indicates that the requested LSP is a protecting LSP and not a working LSP.
Type
This field indicates the level of end-to-end protection for this LSP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 551
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Statistics tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
Created
Specifies the value of SysUpTime when the first instance of this tunnel came into existence.
Uptime
This value identifies the total time that this tunnel instance's operStatus has been Up.
Total Uptime
This value identifies the total time that this tunnel instance's operStatus has been Up.
552 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
UNI tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (forward) data link at the
destination UNI.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 553
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (reverse) data link at the
destination UNI.
The label to be used for the in-segment at the source UNI-N in the forward direction.
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a (forward) data link for the in-
segment at the source UNI-N.
The label to be used at the source UNI-N for the out-segment in the reverse direction.
The logical port identifier used to uniquely identify and select a data link for the reverse out-
segment at the source UNI-N.
554 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Error tab
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
0: No Error
1: Unknown
2: Protocol
3: Path Computation
4: Local Configuration
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 555
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
5: Local Resources
6: Local Other
Last Time
Report Type
Reporter
The address of the node reporting the last error, or the address of the resource (such as an
interface) associated with the error.
Code
Subcode
The secondary error code associated with the last error and the protocol used to signal this
tunnel.
TLVs
The sequence of interface identifier TLVs reported with the error by the protocol code.
Help String
A textual string containing information about the last error, recovery actions and support
advice.
556 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Select the call, press LSP List button, select the LSP and click on Details button> Routing
TAB
This window describes the LSP attributes / entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels
that are part of the same call, as well as their statuses
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
AR Hop Index
The Tunnel ARHop Table is used to indicate the hops, strict or loose, for an GMPLS tunnel
defined in TunnelTable, as reported by the GMPLS signaling protocol for the outgoing
direction of the tunnel.
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Forward Global
For the Present bits, a set bit indicates that a label is present for this hop in the route.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 557
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Reverse Global
For the Present bits, a set bit indicates that a label is present for this hop in the route.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
IP Address
Interface
This value will contain the interface identifier of the unnumbered interface for this hop.
558 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window describes the attributes / entry in the table that specifies the tunnel hop list
configuration
Filter
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
Hop Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
TE Link ID
The interface index of the containing bundle interface. If the interface is not a component
interface to any bundle the value MUST be zero.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 559
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Hop Type
Read Only - This parameter can not be configurable – always set as strict.
Include
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network
Forwarding Adjacency LSPs are established on request by the operator similarly to any other
LSP.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
560 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Select the call, press LSP List button, select the LSP and click on Details button> Routing
TAB
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the hops, strict or loose, for
an MPLS tunnel defined in the table.
List Index
Primary index into this table identifying a particular computed hop list.
C Hop Index
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Explicit Label
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 561
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Reverse Label
Interface
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
this value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
562 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Select the call, press LSP List button, select the LSP and click on Details button> Routing
TAB
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies the hops for an MPLS
tunnel defined in the table.
Ingress
The Ingress LSR ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Egress
The Egress LSR ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Tunnel ID
The Tunnel ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
LSP ID
The LSP ID of the protecting mplsTunnelTable entry which this PPRO is linked to.
Index
IP Address
IP Prefix Len
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 563
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This value will contain an appropriate prefix length for the IP address.
Address Unnumber
This value will contain the interface identifier of the unnumbered interface for this hop.
Forward Present
A Forwarding Adjacency (FA) is a construct to reduce the routing and signalling traffic in a
GMPLS network.
Reverse Present
The logical identifier used to uniquely identify a (reverse) data link at the destination UNI.
Forward Global
For the Present bits, a set bit indicates that a label is present for this hop in the route.
Reverse Global
For the Present bits, a set bit indicates that a label is present for this hop in the route.
Explicit Label
Reverse Label
564 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window provides the user the entry in the table that specifies all the LSP tunnels that are
part of the same call, as well as their statuses.
Tunnel Index
Tunnel Instance
Ingress LSR ID
Egress LSR ID
LSP name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 565
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window provides the user the entry that describes the GMPLS CMS interface attributes
for Surpass hiT network elements.
Starting Time
Packets Tx
566 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
KBytes Tx
Packets Rx
KBytes Rx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 567
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window provides the user the entry that describes the GMPLS CMS interface attributes
for Surpass hiT network elements.
568 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
GMPLS Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Packets Tx
KBytes Tx
Packets Rx
KBytes Rx
Hello Packets Tx
Path/Resv Packets Tx
SRefresh Packets Tx
Other Packets Tx
Hello KBytes Tx
Path/Resv KBytes Tx
SRefresh KBytes Tx
Other KBytes Tx
Hello Packets Rx
Path/Resv Packets Rx
SRefresh Packets Rx
Other Packets Rx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 569
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) GMPLS Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Hello KBytes Rx
Path/Resv KBytes Rx
SRefresh KBytes Rx
Other KBytes Rx
570 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
39 IF7FE2GEL2 card
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select L2 Switch tab).
General
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 571
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The Tunneling Mac Address used for Trasparent Transport Of Customer BPDUs.
Aging Timeout
Enable protocol identifier selection, the value indicates that the frame carries the protocol tag
information
GARP
Enable GVRP
The administrative status requested by management for GVRP. The value enabled (1)
indicates that GVRP should be enabled on this device, on all ports for which it has not been
specifically disabled. When disabled (2), GVRP is disabled on all ports and all GVRP packets
will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Enable GMRP
The administrative status requested by management for GMRP. The value enabled(1)
indicates that GMRP should be enabled on this device, in all VLANs, on all ports for which it
has not been specifically disabled. When disabled(2), GMRP is disabled, in all VLANs, on all
ports and all GMRP packets will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
572 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Broadcast tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Broadcast tab).
Broadcast mode
The item allows to disable or to enable three different broadcast storm recovery modes
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 573
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This item store the limit to be used switch wide (i.e. on all the ports)
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
This table store committed broadcast storm rate value over witch the exceeding broadcast
packets are discarded. This table store committed policing rate values. This is the sstained
rate permitted by policing.
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
574 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
STP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select STP tab).
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 575
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Force Version
1: STP
2: Rapid STP
3: Multi STP
Revision
Digest Key
Value as Hexadecimal.
Format Selector
The MST configuration format selector. A value different from 0 (zero) indicates non-support
for the IEEE 802.1s standard is not supported.
The MST tab is only available when the Force Version has the value Multi STP
If the Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled is enable and the user wants to change the Force
Version, then a Warning message "For Configuring the STP Force Version you must disable
STP Globally Enabled first!" will be shown.
576 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
CST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select CST tab).
CONFIG
The MSTP bridge hello time for the CIST. The default value is 2.
The MSTP bridge forward delay for the CIST. The default value is 15.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 577
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Rules:
Bridge Priority
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
0 | 4096 | 8192 | 12288 | 16384 | 20480 | 24576 | 28672 | 32768 | 36864 | 40960 | 45056 |
49152 | 53248 | 57344 | 61440
Status
The MSTP root port max age for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
The MSTP root port forward delay for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on
any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of hundredths
of a second.
The MSTP bridge hold time for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Hexadecimal format.
Bridge ID
Hexadecimal format.
The MSTP time since the last topology change for this CIST.
578 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1: True
2: False
Root Port ID
Hexadecimal format.
Designated Root ID
Hexadecimal format.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 579
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
MST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab).
MST ID [1..4094]
Range: 1..4094
580 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
Bridge ID
Hexadecimal Value
Designated Root ID
Hexadecimal Value.
Value as delivered.
Root Port ID
Hexadecimal Value.
Value
1: True
2: False
VLANs
Buttons Function
Add…
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 581
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Modify
Delete
Only visible if an entry in the MST Table is selected. Deletes the selected Entry.
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select IGMP Snooping tab).
582 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This enables or disables IGMP Snooping on the system. Default values is disabled
1: Checked /Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Interval
IGMP group interval time on the system. This is time that the switch will wait before deleting
the interface from the entry because it do not receive a report from a particular interface.
Default value is 260s. Range 1:3600
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max response time for the system. The max
response time is the time that the switch will wait after sending a query in an interface
because it does not receive a report from a particular group in that interface. Default value is
10s . Range 1:3600
Expiration time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max expiration time. It is the time that the
switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed
from the list of the interface with a multicast routers attached. Default value is 0s. Range
0:3600
Multicast Control Frames Processed by the CPU. The number of multicast control frames that
have been processed by the CPU
LCT / OS can configure the IGMP Snooping operation per port. The value enable indicates
that IGMP Snooping is enable on this port in all VLAs . A value disable indicates that IGMP
Snooping is disabled on the port in all VLANs.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 583
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
COS tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select COS tab).
User Priority
A table that contains information about the 802.1p prioeity mapping to traffic class priority
queue for every physical port.
584 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Translation tab).
The item allows to disable or to enable such different VLAN change modes
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 585
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
No Change (NoCh)
VLAN ID
Egress VLAN Id
The set of ports which are permanently assigned to the egress list for this VLAN by
management.
586 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority tab).
VLAN ID
VLAN Mode
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure the mode of operation for a VLAN Id.
Trap tab
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 587
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Trap tab).
Link Up/Down
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Spanning Tree
This flag enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
588 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Mirroring tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Mirroring tab).
Mirroring Mode
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 589
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Probe Port
Mirrored Port
590 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> Add push-
button.
MST ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Selected
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 591
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.
592 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> select on
entry -> Modify push-button.
MST ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Selected
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 593
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.
594 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> Add
push-button.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 595
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> select
an entry row -> Modify push-button.
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode
596 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Status
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 597
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Permanent MACs tab).
PERMANENT MACS
VLAN ID
MAC Address
598 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Learned MACs tab).
Learned MACs
VLAN ID
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
Status
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 599
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1: Other
2: Invalid
3: Learned
4: Self
5: Mgmt
600 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Destination Ports
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be even for Unicast Addresses."
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 601
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
Destination Ports
602 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Permanent MACs tab.
PERMANENT MACS
VLAN ID
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.
Destination Port
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 603
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Registered MACs tab.
Registered MACs
VLAN ID
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Protocol
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.
1: Static
2: GMRP
3: IGMP
Type
1: Static
2: Dinamic
604 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Description
Forward Ports
Filter Ports
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 605
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: :
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Destination Ports
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
606 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> (select an entry in the table) -
> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
Destination Ports
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 607
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports...
Port Name
MAC Address
A Multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Administrative Status
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
Operational Status
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
608 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 609
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> General tab.
GENERAL
Values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Administrative Mode
Local Ports:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Logical Ports:
1: Enabled
610 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2: Disabled
Auto-Negotiation
This object identifies the administration status of auto negotiation for this port.
Manager can freeze all the dynamically learned MAC addresses assocated to a port, and stop
the learning mode on this port.
1: Freeze
2: Unfreeze
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Configures the Customer ID for the Double Vlan Tag for this port.
Range: 0..4095
This object identifies the largest value that can be configured for agentPortMaxFrameSize.
This object identifies the currently configured maximum frame size value for this port. The
maximum value that this object can be set to is the value of agentPortMaxFrameSizeLimit.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 611
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
VLAN tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> VLAN tab.
VLAN
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
Range: 2..4094
When this is admitOnlyVlanTagged (2) the device will discard untagged frames or Priority-
Tagged frames received on this port. When admitAll(1), untagged frames or Priority-Tagged
frames received on this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
1: Admit all
612 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
GVRP/GMRP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> GVRP/GMRP tab.
GVRP/GMRP
The administrative state of GMRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that
GMRP is enabled on this port in all VLANs as long as dot1dGmrpStatus is also enabled (1). A
value of disabled(2) indicates that GMRP is disabled on this port in all VLANs: any GMRP
packet received will be silently discarded and no GMRP registrations will be propagated from
other ports.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP is
enabled on this port, as long as dot1qGvrpStatus is also enabled for this device. When
disabled (2) but dot1qGvrpStatus is still enabled for the device, GVRP is disabled on this port:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GARP TIMERS
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 613
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Range: 1..100
Range: 20..600
Range: 200..6000
STP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> STP tab.
STP
614 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The default port STP state is enabled for the first 4095 ports and disabled for any ports
beyond.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Time since port was reset. It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Note: For a correct handling of LAG, the STP should be enabled on the involved parts.
CST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> CST tab.
CONFIG
Edge State
1: Checked
2: Unchecked.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 615
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
Range: 1..240
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
STATUS
1: Enable
2: Disable
The MSTP operational point to point mac of a specific port for the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port ID
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
Designated Port ID
Designated Cost
616 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Topology Changing
The MSTP topology change acknowledge for a specific port in the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port Role
MST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> MST tab.
MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 617
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Range: 1..240
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
Port ID
Value as Delivered.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
Designated Port ID
Designated Cost
Port Role
618 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Policing tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Policing tab.
Policing
This item indicates the status of the port policing control that can be:
1: checked / enabled
2: unchecked /disabled
This specifies the bandwith limit of the indexed port, over which the broadcast packets are
discarded.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 619
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Tunnelling tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Tunnelling tab.
BPDU Tunneling
1: Tunneling
2: No Tunneling
620 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> VLAN Translation tab.
Egress VLAN ID
The item represents an egress vlan Id that replaces the incoming vlan Id on the incoming
port. This table is significant if Vlan Change Mode is equal to "Per port change" . It store the
out Vlan ID Tag that translate the ingress tags received on the port Id.
Incoming Vlan Id
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 621
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Egress QoS tab.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queueing Mode
1: Disabled
Weight Factor is a 16 bit value which limits total bandwidth that a queue occupies in case of
congestion.
622 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Deficit Count
The deficit count for the queue, a 21 bit value which is reduced by the packet length for every
packet transmitted from the queue.
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Traffic Shaping tab.
Port rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queue rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping
This value can be setup in 64kps steps up to the port cpacity (10, 100, Mbps or 1 Gbps).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 623
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> ETH Packets tab.
ETH PACKETS
Unicast Packets Rx
Unicast Packets Tx
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
624 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in
length but do not pass the FCS check.
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
STP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> STP tab.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 625
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
STP BPDU Rx
STP BPDU Tx
RSTP BPDU Rx
RSTP BPDU Tx
MSTP BPDU Rx
MSTP BPDU Tx
626 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG...
Lag ID
Name
Link Trap
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Type
Lag Type
1: static
2: dynamic
LAG ID Ports
Port speed
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 627
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Port
Status
1: active
2: inactive
628 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> Add... push button.
Name
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 629
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.
Name
Link Trap
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Type
Lag Type
630 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> LAG Statistics push
button.
Unicast Packets Rx
Unicast Packets Tx
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 631
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
Errors Occurred RX
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them form being delivered
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
632 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups...
Group
Ports
Rx Water Port Group string
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Note:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 633
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Drop
634 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Queue Config...
push button.
Group
Queue
Water Mark
This specifies Tx Water Mark Value for the Port Group queue.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 635
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> Current tab.
FILTER
Severity
Trap
Selection of Trap
Set Filter
Filter selection
636 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TRAP
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
Severity
linkUp Port Cleared (Not The linkUp trap is issued when the
Alarmed) sending protocol entity recognizes that
one of the communication links
represented in the agent's configuration
has come up (i.e. signals that a
linkDown don’t exist anymore).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 637
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
ValidCDB Card Cleared (Not The ValidCDB trap is issued when the
Alarmed) CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file
is valid.
638 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
History tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> History tab.
LOG
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
Description
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 639
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration.
This table contains information about every aggregate that is associated with the System
Aggregator ID
MAC Address
A read only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator
System Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Administrator key
Operational Key
640 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
A read only value that indicates the priority value associated with the Partner System ID. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system priority value will be a value assigned by the
local system
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator’s current protocol partner
This value defines the maximum delay, in terms of microsecond, that may be imposed by the
frame collector between receiving a frame from an aggregate Parser , and either delivering
the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 641
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Details push button.
Aggregator ID
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Administrator key
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
642 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partner’s System ID
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s
System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
Port priority
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s
protocol partner
Port priority
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 643
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
644 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push button.
Aggregator ID
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Administrator key
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 645
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partner’s System ID
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s
System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
Port priority
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s
protocol partner
Port priority
646 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 647
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Statistics...
Interface
Port name
LACPDU Rx
Marker PDU Rx
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this aggregation port
648 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Unknown Rx
The number of frames received that either carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but
contain an unknown PDU or are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do
not carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type
Illegal Rx
The number of frames received that carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol subtype
LACPDU Tx
Marker PDU Tx
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 649
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Debug...
Filter
Interface
Port name
Port Name
Rx State
1. Current
650 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. Expired
3. Defaulted
4. Initialize
5. LACP Disabled
6. Port Disabled
Last Rx Time
The value of time when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation Port
Mux State
The value of the MUX state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Detached
2. Waiting
3. Attached
4. Collecting
5. Distributing
6. Collecting-distributing
Mux reason
A human-readable text string indicating the reason for the most recent change of MUX state
machine
Churn State
The state of the Actor Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_ACTOR_CHURN or the
ACTOR_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
ACTOR_CHURN state
The state of the Partner Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_PARTNER_CHURN or the
PARTNER_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Actors Churn state machine has entered the
ACTOR_CHURN state
Count of the number of times the Partner Churn state machine has entered the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Count of the number of times the Actor’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 651
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Count of the number of times the Partner’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC
state
Change Count
Count of the number of times the Actor’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed
Count of the number of times the Partner’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed
652 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Configuration...
VLAN ID
VLAN Type
1. Other
2. Permanent
3. Dynamic GVRP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 653
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Add push-button...
VLAN ID [1..4096]
Port Name
Participation
654 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 655
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID [1..4096]
Port Name
656 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Participation
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 657
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button.
VLAN ID
Port Name
Participation
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
658 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> VLAN Statistics...
VLAN ID
Frames Tx
The number of valid frames transmitted by this port to its segment from the local forwarding
process for this VLAN.
Discarted Frames Rx
The number of valid frames received by this port from its segment which were classified as
belonging to this VLAN which were discarded due to VLAN related reasons.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 659
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data that this etherStats entry is configured to analyze.
String with the ethernet interface on this device.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
660 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Octets
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 661
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an item in the table) -> Details push-button..
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
662 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 663
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Control...
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Buckets Granted
The number of discrete sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600
Status
1: Valid
664 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2: Under Creation
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 665
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Add push-button..
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600
666 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by
the same value of historyControlIndex.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 667
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
Sample Index
An index that uniquely identifies the particular sample this entry represents among all
samples associated with the same historyControlEntry.
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a
bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
668 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 669
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-
button...
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the
same value of historyControlIndex.
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
670 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IF7FE2GEL2 Card Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-
integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 671
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IF7FE2GEL2 Card
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
672 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
40 IFS10GBE
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
This kind of protection is made on switching fabric cards, and it is basically made of a set of
two cross-connections from (Head End) or to (Tail End) the same resource.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 673
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.
674 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 675
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
676 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information of which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been
connected to.
Port classification
• non GMPLS
• UNI10
• E-NNI
• I-NNI
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 677
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
678 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menus of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 679
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
group and VC symbol indicates that, for this GFP group, no VC assignment has been done
yet. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each
VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.
The VLAN functionality is meaningful only if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications, QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer, as well as
the egress buffers, of a receiving FE card may happen. By this, packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.
Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected BRAS
does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of the receiving
FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow control has influence on
all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the possible 8 downlink ports). If
for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the activated pause frame mechanism will
stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).
680 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Notes:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 681
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the GFP Group traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
682 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 683
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.
Notes:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
684 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Note:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 685
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Note:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.
686 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS10GBE symbol ->
This window shows the GFP Group traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 687
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
688 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).
Enable / Disable
Enable / Disable
Laser Data:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 689
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.
690 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
performance monitoring is enabled.
Display Meaning
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 691
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
692 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Date
Time
TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.
Dropped Frames Rx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
Total frames Rx
Average Throughput
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 693
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -
> Information -> ASIC Data...
694 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
IFS10GBE Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> LCAS State...
This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.
Filter:
Selected Item:
Sink
Source
Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the signal
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 695
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) IFS10GBE
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
696 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Security Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
41 Security
You:
The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".
Nobody:
If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface,
"F-interface" is shown.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 697
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Security
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...
The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems: OS, LCT and NCT.
Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in
the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in
the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to
the default password.
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password
and type the new password twice.
The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.
Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will
be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.
Note:
When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new
password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).
698 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Security Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...
Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.
The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 699
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Security
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
700 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Software Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
42 Software
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management...
This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers
software download functions.
Active APS:
Order Number
SW/FW Code
APS Record...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 701
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Software
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Inactive APS:
Load State
Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download
Order Number
SW/FW Code
Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.
If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the
inactive APS to active
Swap APS
With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is
induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the
startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous
APS.
After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.
702 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Software Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -
> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software
download process.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 703
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Software
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant
file) -> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software
download process.
704 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Software Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management... -> APS Record...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 705
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Software
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...
This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application
Program System) object in a tree structure.
706 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
43 Fault Clearance
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 707
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
708 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• IFO155M
• IFQ622M
• IFS2G5
• IFS2G5B
• IFQ2G5
• IFQ2G5B
• IFS10G
• IFS10GB
• IFS10G-M
• IFS10G-R
• IFS10G-WLS
• IFQGBE
• IFQBEB
• IFOFE
• IFS40G-MX
• IFSOA
• IFSOA-PDC
• IFSOB
• IFSOB-PDC
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 709
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. To clock failure.
710 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Card unavailable.
The used port module type does not match the card interface.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 711
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
712 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• IF2M
• IF345M
• IFO155M-E
• IFQGBE-E
• IFQGBEB-E
• IFOFE-E
• IFOFES-E
• IFOFGE-E
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 713
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
Card failed.
2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
714 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. Check the configuration, what´s the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If
there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are
failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong
(too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.
1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and
Tx (TLCT).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 715
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC
groups).
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS
is configured.
Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay
between each other is too great.
1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.
Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.
716 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 717
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• SF2G5
• SF2G5
• SF10G
• SF160G
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:
718 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. To clock failure.
Card unavailable.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 719
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
720 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:
EOW failed.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 721
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Flash SW failed.
For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".
1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
T0 clock failure.
722 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 723
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:
As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.
724 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Fault Clearance Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.
The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.
1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2
Failure",
see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 725
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Fault Clearance
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
726 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (General Tasks) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack
Parameters -> Configuration
3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the
address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.
Note:
The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be
changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 727
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (General Tasks)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE
equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.
3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of
the selected card type is added to the Module View.
4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click
Configuration.
728 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (General Tasks) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
5. Click Apply.
The card will be added to the required equipping.
6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the
associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 729
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (General Tasks)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration ->
Port Provisioning...
4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.
5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are
equipped with the same card type and configured properly.
6. Click Apply.
730 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (General Tasks) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
44.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object
to Object
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.
3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy
Data...
(or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s)
you want to copy,
or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.
5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.
6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.
7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to
select all entries in the list.
8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 731
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (General Tasks)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...
2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and
card name.
3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.
4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.
5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
732 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (General Tasks) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC4-
6v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.
6. Concerning LCAS:
For all involved VC´s, LCAS must be activated.
2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window.
When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH
connection is sure).
3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP
Assignment window.
5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated
or not; no mixed way)?
6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is
coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the
subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 733
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (General Tasks)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
734 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Timing) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
T0:
- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received
quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not
override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
T1:
T3:
9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3
symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.
10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system
clock selection.
11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a
synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red
cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source.
To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.
T4:
13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode,
and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 735
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Timing)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output
selection.
16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.
17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can
enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR)
Time.
736 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Timing) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of
the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use".
If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will
change the other priorities automatically.
3. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 737
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Timing)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
738 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Alarms) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed.
No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.
3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by
highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.
4. Click OK.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 739
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Alarms)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or
SEC Alarms...
(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).
3. Click Apply.
2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...
4. Click Apply.
740 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Alarms) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...
2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or
Open input polarity for each used TIF port.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 741
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Alarms)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
742 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the
filtering features.
3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings
change to All.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 743
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation
Counter N value (if applicable).
TP A:
4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
TP B:
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
connection end point.
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
744 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 745
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
746 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 747
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure
on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.
6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.
7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.
8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-
>Close).
Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible
TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings).
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
748 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. Before a cross connection at VC12nv/ VC3-2v level could be performed, the following
preliminary step need to be carried out:
on the LO matrix (SF10G / SF2G5) two VC12-nv/VC3-2v groups need to be created (see
also 52.2 “How to configure SDH concatenations”): a first one to be connected to the first
SDH card and the second to be connected to the second SDH card; in this phase the
operator must care that the two new groups are consistent (i.e. they include the same
members) with the circuits to be connected from the SDH cards.
Example: if the VC3-2v coming from the first SDH line card uses VC3 #2 and #3, the
VC3-2v configured on the LO matrix that will be connected to this group must include the
same members: dually, if the VC3-2v coming from the second SDH line card uses VC3
#2 and #3, the VC3-2v configured on the LO matrix that will be connected to this group
must include the same members:
In case of VC12-nv groups to be connected the same attention has to be paid.
6. Select the first SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected.
7. Select the second SDH card in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B
Selection field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected
8. Click Propose Connection: the combined cross connection proposed by the LCT (made of
three single connections) is displayed in blue text.
The operator must now check that proposed connections are correct, i.e.
1. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the first SDH card must
be the one consistent with the group configured / expected from that line side
2. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the second SDH card
must be the one consistent with the group configured / expected from that line
side
If no, do not accept the proposed connection and connect all the involved VC groups/TPs one
by one in three consecutive steps, and continue from point 12.
9. Click Connect. – If the shown connections is the cross connection entry changes to black
text if connected.
10. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings)
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..-->
End of procedure
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 749
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
13. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the desired connection type (VC12-nv / VC3-
2v connection layer):
14. Select the first SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4mux that contains the VC group to be connected from that card
15. Select on the LO matrix in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B Selection
field the VC group to be connected to the first SDH card, according to the incoming
circuit
17. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to connect the VC group in the LO matrix to the VC group in
the second SDH card, now selecting as Card A the second SDH card, TP A the VC4mux
that contains the VC group to be connected from that card; Card B the LO Matrix and TP
B the VC group in the LO to be connected to the second SDH card
18. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to reciprocally connect the VC groups in the LO matrix, now
selecting as Card A the LO matrix and TP A one of the VC groups created at point 1.b: as
card B again the LO Matrix and as TP B the other VC group created at point 1)
19. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic.. -->
End of procedure
750 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. the VC12-nv /VC3-2v group must be created on the ETH card (see also 52.2
“How to configure ETH concatenations”)
1. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the SDH card must be
the one consistent with the group configured / expected from the line side
2. 4. the VC12-nv/VC3-2v group on the LO matrix attached to the ETH card must
be the one consistent with the corresponding group previously configured (point
1.a) on the ETH card.
If no, do not accept the proposed connection and connect all the involved VC groups/TPs one
by one in three consecutive steps, and continue from point 12
9. Click Connect. – If the shown connections is the cross connection entry changes to
black text if connected.
10. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings)
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..--
> End of procedure
12. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 751
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
13. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the desired connection type (VC12-nv /
VC3-2v connection layer):
14. Select the SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select as TP in the TP A Selection
field the VC4 that contains the VC group to be connected to the ETH card
15. Select on the LO matrix in the Card B Selection field, select as TP in the TP B
Selection field the VC group to be connected to the SDH card, according to the
incoming circuit
16. Click Propose Connection and accept
17. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to connect the VC group in the LO matrix to the VC group
in the ETH card, now selecting as Card A the ETH card, TP A the VC group created
at point 1a; Card B the LO Matrix and TP B the VC group in the LO to be connected
to the ETH card
18. Repeat steps from 12 to 16 to reciprocally connect the VC groups in the LO matrix,
now selecting as Card A the LO matrix and TP A one of the VC groups created at
point 1.b: as card B again the LO Matrix and as TP B the other VC group created at
point 1.b.)
19. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic.. --
> End of procedure
752 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->
Close).
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card
respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
10. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 8 and 9 with TPB'.
11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
12. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue
text.
13. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
14. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 753
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected
cross connection type.
5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end
point.
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.
754 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
7. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
8. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
13. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
14. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
15. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 755
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point
9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same
card A and TP a settings.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
756 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross
connection in the list.
3. Click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking
Graphic..
11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking
Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 757
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross
connection.
3. Click Delete.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.
758 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.
3. Click Disconnect.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be
disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 759
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC ->
Configuration...
3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to
configure.
4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.
760 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (OH Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the
selection fields to select the filtering features.
4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field
settings change to All.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 761
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (OH Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list,
select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.
4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP A entry.
5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.
6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.
7. Click Connect.
762 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (OH Cross Connections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross
connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in
detail in the OH CC Options area.
4. Click Disconnect.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 763
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (OH Cross Connections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
764 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
Click Apply.
3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.
4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and
click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.
7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply.
The 1+1 MSP protection is active.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.
4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click
Apply. Confirm the warning message.
6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols ->
Protection...
7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click
Delete.
8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
9. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 765
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select
the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.
8. Click Apply.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.
766 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one
of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode.
If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be
configured automatically..
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
8. Click Apply.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 767
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2F-
SPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING ->
Configuration... -> Squelch...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign
the required Node Ids to each AU4.
5. Click Apply.
768 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number
symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.
2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.
3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any
working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol
-> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection
scheme
Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection
scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this
card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will
not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A
deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:
a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall
be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into
the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is
configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the
respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it
started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection
slot will not cause any traffic hits.
If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection
group!
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 769
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
770 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number
symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.
3. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the
working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card
symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 771
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working
card.
772 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TP A:
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
TP B:
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
connection end point.
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.
14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.
15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
16. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 773
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to
be prepared -> Subview...
3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...
4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...
5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab,
activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n.
To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.
7. If LO concatenation is to be used:
In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create
the required concatenated containers.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified -> Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.
4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been
selected in the previous steps.
Click the button "To TPA >>"
774 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the
protecting path.
Click the button "To TPB >>"
6. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
7. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
9. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 775
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1
tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection
or 4F-SPRING protection.
6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.
776 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 777
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Protections)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC
subrack and the extension shelf is connected.
2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.
7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4
symbol -> Configuration...
8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.
10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.
11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection
with the number according to the actual configuration.
13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4
symbol -> Configuration...
14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM protection card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols ->
Protection...
778 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Protections) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 779
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• The “IP Addresses Configuration” window is accessible via the Module View,
Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration ->
TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...
• We have to set the addresses of Ethernet Interface (eth0) and Local Loopback Interface
(lo:0)
OSPF Configuration
• The OSPF Configuration window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by
using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic
Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 781
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• The “OSPF Interfaces Configuration” is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1
tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP
dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces…
Note: After the initial startup (with default MIB) in the non-GMPLS mode, OSPF is running but
with all interfaces disabled. If the operator would like to use OSPF he has to enable OPSF at
the respective interfaces. For disabling OSPF at all, the operator has to set the AdminStatus
of OSPF to down.
• The OSPF Neighbours Information window is accessible via the Module View,
Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration ->
TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
782 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
RSVP Configuration
• The window to configure some parameters of RSVP is accessible via SCOH Card
symbol > Configuration > GMPLS > Configuration…
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 783
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
TP Reservation to GMPLS
• The TP Reservation window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context
menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Reserve TPs...
• Select “Reserved” for the ports (line and client) reserved for GMPLS.
Port Configuration
• The Port Configuration window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the
context menu of an interface card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or
Configuration -> Port...
784 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• For Client Interface Cards, select NON GMPLS in Port Classification field.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 785
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Interface Configuration window. This window is accessible via SCOH Card
symbol > Configuration > GMPLS > Interfaces…
• Click the Add button. The Entry Add window will be opened.
o Remote Router ID -> For a point to point link, this specifies the router ID of the
remote peer.
786 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
o SRLG IDs -> This identifies an SRLG supported by the TE link. (The risk to be
broken)
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 787
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the interface. Click the Interface
Management button.
788 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• In the Administrative Status field, select Up to enable and Down to disable the TE link.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 789
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. The Administrative
Status field must be Down.
• In TE Link tab, in SRLG IDs section, you can Add or Delete the SRLG ID
• In the same tab, in Metric field, you can change the metric value.
790 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. The Administrative
Status field must be Down.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 791
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Interface Configuration window. Select the TE Link. Change the
Administrative Status from Up to Down. Click the Delete button.
792 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window. This window is accessible via SCOH Card symbol >
Configuration > GMPLS > Call List…
• Click the Add button. The Call Entry Add window will be opened.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 793
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
794 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Change the Administrative Status from Up to Down. Click the Delete button.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 795
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
796 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button. The
Call Entry Modify window will be opened.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 797
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
798 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button. The
Call Entry Modify window will be opened.
• Reversion describes the process during which recovered traffic is switched back to the
original path.
• hiT7070 support reversion of the original working as well as the original protection path.
• The operator can manually switch back to the original path by the switch commands.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 799
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Delete button.
800 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GMPLS) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button.
• In General tab, in Protection Class field, modify from Unprotected to the desired
protection.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 801
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (GMPLS)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
• Open the Call List window, select the protected call and click the Modify button.
Note: It is not possible the migration from a Protected call to a different protection.
802 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Concatenations) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and
TPs, as applicable.
6. Click Apply.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 803
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How to... (Concatenations)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
5. Click Apply.
804 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (GFP Configurations) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the
Concatenation Group Templates.
Click Apply.
5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message.
8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP
group.
9. Click Apply.
10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.
Note:
To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross
connection.
If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload
interruption of all channels served by the card.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 805
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (GFP Configurations)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol ->
Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value
for the concerned Ethernet port.
Note:
Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum
must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH
capacity may cause packet loss!
806 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Data and Software Handling) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
4. Click Download...
A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After
the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the
VCDB download is successfully completed.
8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close
to close the window.
Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to
verify which setting is missing).
After removing the error, repeat the download process.
9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the
NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE
symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...
10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE
will be initialized automatically.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 807
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Data and Software Handling)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.
5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the
upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB
upload is successfully completed..
Note:
During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.
808 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an
operating SCOH.
The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC.
The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC.
To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again.
If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be
adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack!
Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot.
Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 809
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.
810 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 811
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
812 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow
chart.
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 813
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
814 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 815
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
816 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 817
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
818 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 819
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) How To... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
820 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Index Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
55 Index
1 N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow .......122 Booster Cards Label Information ........... 50
2 C
Alarm List..............................................101
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 821
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Index
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC How to Add and Remove Path Protections
Connections .....................................316 ......................................................... 754
GMPLS tunnel List PPRO Hop Table...563 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line
Protection......................................... 765
H
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Protection......................................... 767
Cross Connection.............................757
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING
How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Protection......................................... 768
Existing LO Path...............................775
How to Create / Delete an 1+1 MSP Line
Protections....................................... 765
822 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Index Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card How to Set Up the Squelching Table... 777
Protection .........................................770
How to Suppress Alarms ..................... 740
How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card
Protection .........................................772 How to Upload VCDB Files.................. 808
How to Create a Cross Connection ......744 IFO155M Card Label Information .......... 43
How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Log Records Attribute .......................... 437
Filter Options ....................................743
LSP List................................................ 565
How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection
Filter Options ....................................761 M
How to Set Sync Priorities ....................737 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information
......................................................... 301
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-
Channel ............................................806 MCF CLNS Performance..................... 303
How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link MCF DCC Configuration ...................... 307
..........................................................779
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 823
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Index
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ....319 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance 709
MCF OSI over IP Adding a Reachable OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration. 354
Address ............................................330
OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add ...... 356
MCF OSI over IP Modifying a Reachable
Address ............................................332 OSPF Area Metric Configuration ......... 352
MCF OSI over IP Configuration............326 OSPF Area Metric Entry Add............... 353
MCF Stack Parameters Configuration..296 OSPF Areas Entry Add ........................ 351
Message Communication Functions ....293 OSPF External LSDB Information ....... 387
Mixed Mode GFP Assignment..............254 OSPF Interface Entry Modify ............... 360
Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ..315 OSPF LSDB Entry Details ................... 385
824 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619
Index Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619 825
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Index
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.4
SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ................14 VC4 Multiplex Structure ....................... 169
Switching Entry Details .........................392 VC4 Selection with ETH Cards............ 141
Synchronous Equipment Clock VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow ......... 100
Configuration ......................................77
VCCTP Far End Performance ............. 463
T
VCCTP Near End Performance........... 459
T0 Configuration .....................................80
VCTTP Far End Performance.............. 471
T1 Configuration .....................................81
VCTTP Near End Performance ........... 467
T3 / T4 Config .........................................83
Virtual 16x VC4 Selection .................... 233
TCA List ................................................119
Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .............. 259
TCP Connections Entry Details ............425
Virtual 2x VC3 Selection ...................... 230
TCP Connections Information ..............423
Virtual 4x VC4 Selection ...................... 231
TIF Configuration ..................................118
Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection ............ 234
TIF Fault Clearance ..............................724
Virtual 7x VC4 Selection ...................... 232
TP_Reservation ......................................75
Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration ............ 266
Tunnel List C Hop table ........................561
Virtual VC12 Configuration .................. 260
U
Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration ............ 263
Using this Help System...........................13
VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment.......... 251
V
VLAN C Traffic Flow .................... 248; 251
VC12 Far End Performance .................479
VLAN Functionality .............................. 245
VC12 Near End Performance...............475
VLAN Selection.................................... 250
VC12-2v Configuration .........................235
W
VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection...........229
Working STM-1 Selection .................... 197
VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ..............156
Working VC4 Selection ........................ 198
826 A42022-L5957-C455-03-7619